Owner’s Manual
2016 MKS
November 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKS
Litho in U.S.A.
GA5J 19A321 AA
2016 MKS Owner’s Manual
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20151009202856
Introduction
About This Manual................................................7
Symbols Glossary..................................................7
Data Recording.......................................................9
California Proposition 65..................................10
Perchlorate..............................................................11
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11
Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11
Special Notices.....................................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment...........12
Export Unique Options......................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment............................14
Child Safety
General Information............................................15
Installing Child Restraints.................................17
Booster Seats.......................................................23
Child Restraint Positioning..............................25
Child Safety Locks...............................................27
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation.......................................28
Fastening the Seatbelts...................................29
Seatbelt Height Adjustment............................31
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..................................................................32
Seatbelt Reminder.............................................33
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.....................................................34
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..............................36
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation........................................37
Driver and Passenger Airbags........................38
Front Passenger Sensing System.................39
Side Airbags...........................................................41
Safety Canopy™.................................................42
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............44
Airbag Disposal...................................................45
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies......................................................46
Remote Control...................................................47
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control................................................................49
MyKey™
Principle of Operation.......................................50
Creating a MyKey.................................................51
Clearing All MyKeys............................................52
Checking MyKey System Status....................53
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..............................................................54
MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.....................................56
Keyless Entry........................................................59
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release................................................................61
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.............................63
Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........................65
Audio Control.......................................................65
Voice Control........................................................66
Cruise Control......................................................66
Information Display Control............................67
Heated Steering Wheel....................................67
1
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.........................................68
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.............................................69
Autowipers............................................................69
Windshield Washers..........................................70
Lighting
General Information............................................71
Lighting Control....................................................71
Autolamps.............................................................72
Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................73
Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73
Daytime Running Lamps..................................73
Automatic High Beam Control.......................74
Front Fog Lamps.................................................75
Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75
Direction Indicators............................................76
Interior Lamps......................................................76
Ambient Lighting.................................................77
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...................................................78
Global Opening and Closing...........................79
Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79
Interior Mirror.........................................................81
Sun Visors...............................................................81
Sun Shades............................................................81
Moonroof...............................................................82
Instrument Cluster
Gauges....................................................................84
Warning Lamps and Indicators.....................85
Audible Warnings and Indicators..................87
Information Displays
General Information..........................................89
Information Messages......................................95
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control...........................105
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.............................................................106
Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107
Cabin Air Filter....................................................108
Remote Start......................................................108
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position......................109
Head Restraints.................................................109
Power Seats..........................................................111
Memory Function...............................................114
Climate Controlled Seats................................115
Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener.....................119
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.....................................124
Storage Compartments
Center Console...................................................126
Overhead Console............................................126
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information..........................................127
Keyless Starting..................................................127
Starting a Gasoline Engine............................128
Engine Block Heater.........................................130
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions............................................132
Fuel Quality..........................................................132
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.............................133
Running Out of Fuel..........................................133
2
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Refueling...............................................................134
Fuel Consumption............................................136
Emission Control System...............................137
Transmission
Automatic Transmission................................140
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive.....................................143
Brakes
General Information.........................................150
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................150
Parking Brake.......................................................151
Hill Start Assist....................................................151
Traction Control
Principle of Operation......................................153
Using Traction Control.....................................153
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.....................................154
Using Stability Control....................................155
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.....................................156
Rear Parking Aid................................................156
Front Parking Aid...............................................157
Active Park Assist..............................................158
Rear View Camera............................................162
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.....................................166
Using Cruise Control........................................166
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.....................167
Driving Aids
Driver Alert............................................................174
Lane Keeping System......................................175
Blind Spot Information System...................179
Cross Traffic Alert..............................................182
Steering................................................................186
Collision Warning System..............................187
Drive Control.......................................................190
Load Carrying
Load Limit............................................................192
Towing
Towing a Trailer..................................................201
Recommended Towing Weights................202
Essential Towing Checks..............................204
Transporting the Vehicle...............................206
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.........206
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.........................................................208
Economical Driving.........................................208
Driving Through Water...................................208
Floor Mats...........................................................209
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance.........................................211
Hazard Warning Flashers................................212
Fuel Shutoff.........................................................212
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................213
Post-Crash Alert System................................215
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need....................216
In California (U.S. Only)...................................217
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)...........................218
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...............................................219
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada..............................................................219
3
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.........................................................220
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......220
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...................................................................221
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart...............................223
Changing a Fuse................................................237
Maintenance
General Information.......................................240
Opening and Closing the Hood..................240
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.....................................................242
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................244
Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................245
Engine Oil Check...............................................245
Oil Change Indicator Reset...........................246
Engine Coolant Check.....................................247
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......250
Brake Fluid Check.............................................254
Power Steering Fluid Check.........................254
Washer Fluid Check.........................................254
Fuel Filter.............................................................255
Changing the 12V Battery..............................255
Checking the Wiper Blades...........................257
Changing the Wiper Blades..........................257
Adjusting the Headlamps.............................258
Changing a Bulb...............................................259
Bulb Specification Chart...............................260
Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................262
Vehicle Care
General Information........................................263
Cleaning Products............................................263
Cleaning the Exterior......................................264
Waxing..................................................................265
Cleaning the Engine........................................265
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...............................................................265
Cleaning the Interior.......................................266
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................266
Cleaning Leather Seats..................................267
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...................267
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels...........................268
Vehicle Storage.................................................268
Wheels and Tires
Tire Care...............................................................270
Using Snow Chains..........................................285
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............286
Changing a Road Wheel................................289
Technical Specifications...............................294
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................296
Engine Specifications - 3.7L.........................297
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™..........298
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...................................299
Vehicle Identification Number....................299
Vehicle Certification Label...........................300
Transmission Code Designation..................301
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................302
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........307
Audio System
General Information.........................................313
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD...............................................................314
Media Hub............................................................316
Accessories
Accessories..........................................................317
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).......................319
4
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information..............321
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............325
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..................................................328
Scheduled Maintenance Record................332
Appendices
End User License Agreement......................352
5
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product features
and options available throughout the range of
available models, sometimes even before they
are generally available. It may describe options
not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different models,
so may appear different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in
line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
7
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
8
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your vehicle,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and
service and repair facilities may access or
share among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when diagnosing
or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, when
your vehicle is in for service or repair, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them data for vehicle improvement
purposes. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you
choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health
Report, you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used for
any purpose.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
9
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the
vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford
Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the occupants
to assist 911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that
you request. If you do not want Ford or
its vendors to receive this information,
do not activate the service. For more
information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
10
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or
financing and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance
or repair. You can clearly identify genuine
Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the
Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the
parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service is
to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
11
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended level
of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of
protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger
airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
system has a data port for diagnostics, repair
and reprogramming services with diagnostic
scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses the
port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use of
any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may
not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in
device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
12
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
14
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately
from your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age
and weight thresholds from the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration and
other safety organizations, or are the
minimum requirements of law. We
recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified
Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST)
and consult your pediatrician to make sure
your child seat is appropriate for your child,
and is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
WARNINGS
contact Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find
a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to
properly restrain children in safety seats
made especially for their height, age, and
weight may result in an increased risk of
serious injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high temperatures
for even a short time can cause death or
serious heat-related injuries, including brain
damage. Small children are particularly at
risk.
15
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
16
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 39).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Children 12 and under should be
properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a child
restraint, and depending on the child
restraint design, you may block access
to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
17
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
18
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or kneeling
on the child restraint while pulling up on
the shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt. This is necessary to remove
the remaining slack that will exist once
the extra weight of the child is added to
the child restraint. It also helps to achieve
the proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra help
to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
19
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments and
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a child
restraint, and depending on the child
restraint design, you may block access
to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to
attach the child seat, however the seatbelt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
E173197
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
20
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E224433
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
Child Seat Positioning for LATCH Lower
Anchors
All the LATCH lower anchors are equally
spaced, 11 inches (28 centimeters) apart,
allowing for the following child seat
positioning:
• If a single child seat is installed using the
LATCH lower anchors, it can be installed
at any rear seating position.
• If two child safety seats are installed
using the LATCH lower anchors, they
must be placed in the outboard seating
positions only.
• If three child safety seats are installed,
you can install two using the LATCH
lower anchors by placing them in each
outboard seating position and the third
in the center using the lap and shoulder
belt, OR you can use the LATCH lower
anchors for the center child safety seat
and the lap and shoulder belts for the
other two child safety seats in the
outboard positions. Use the tether
anchors if applicable.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap
afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
21
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether
strap enough to lift the child seat off your
vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated
in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the
child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives
the best protection in a severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
E173198
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected
seating position, then open the tether
anchor cover.
E173199
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
E173200
4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
22
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body
and may increase the risk of injury or death
in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many
state and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45
meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable
shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating
position has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat may place
your child's head (as measured at the tops
of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or
consider using a high back booster seat.
23
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
24
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position,
properly restrain the largest child in the front
seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age, or
weight or does not properly fit the child may
increase the risk of serious injury or death.
25
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash, which may
result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
WARNINGS
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body
and may increase the risk of injury or death
in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight
of child and child
seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
26
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 109).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
27
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a seatbelt
properly.
WARNINGS
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seatbelt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly which
is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair.
1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the seatbelt
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3)
Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained
in a rear seating position. Failure to
follow this could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
Seatbelts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles before
you place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear seatbelts for optimum protection
in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking
mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
· Seatbelt warning light and chime.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
28
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
seatbelts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when the Safety Canopy is
deployed.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button and
remove the tongue from the buckle.
E142589
When in use, the rear safety belts should be
placed in the belt guides on the outboard
seatbacks.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The shoulder
portion of the safety belt should be
positioned across the chest. Pregnant women
should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
29
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the automatic
locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly must
be replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger and
rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
30
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
turn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the fit
of the shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the
safety belt extension only if the safety belt is
too short for you when fully extended.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjusters
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the
safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
31
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
32
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have a
front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
33
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger warnings
switch on and off independently. When you
perform this procedure for one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as
this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts.
Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), rear inflatable safety belts (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions
for additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all safety belt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the
belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
34
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
36
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child
restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can result
in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of
injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag
deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds
(for example, baking soda) that result from
the combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide
may be present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
37
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result
in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be propelled
by the airbag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 44).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
38
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
seat. Never place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seat back, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E173214
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition is
first turned on to confirm it is functional.
39
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing
infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint,
or a booster seat is detected. Even with this
technology, parents are strongly encouraged
to always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag
when the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing system
disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system
enables the front passenger frontal airbag
(may inflate), the passenger airbag status
indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and
remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat back in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
40
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may be
disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment
injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 44).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 216).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
41
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an
accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as
you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating
that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
44).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
42
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner
on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment path
of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 44).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
43
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end
of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front seatbelt pretensioners, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbags
and the Safety Canopy. Based on the type of
crash, the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or stay
lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the event
of a crash.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to deploy
a safety device.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather,
it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt pretensioners
is to activate in frontal, near-frontal and
side crashes and in rollovers.
44
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
45
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment. The term IC before
the radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in operating
range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the mechanical
key blade in your intelligent access key to
open the driver door in this situation. See
Remote Control (page 47).
46
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E173598
Your intelligent access key operates the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E173599
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control to release the mechanical key blade,
and then pull the blade out.
E173600
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of the
circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E173599
1. Remove the mechanical key blade from
the transmitter.
47
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E173601
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E173602
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Install a new batteries with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure that it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter and install the mechanical
key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. The horn will sound and
the turn signals will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle is
remote started. See Remote Start (page
108). A manual climate control system will
run at the setting it was set to when you
switched the vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• you disable the feature
• the hood is open
• the transmission is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• the service engine soon light is on.
48
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle will
not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to
start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start will
run the blower fan at a slower speed to
reduce noise. It can be switched on or off in
the information display. See General
Information (page 89).
Note: If the vehicle has been remote started
with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you
must switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. With an intelligent access transmitter,
you must press the START/STOP button on
the instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during the
remote start and the radio will not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed
the duration to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes will begin after what is left of the
first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle will
continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.
You can extend the remote start up to a
maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The parking
lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the running
vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display. See
General Information (page 89).
Memory Feature
You can recall the positions of the memory
seat, outside mirrors, steering column and
power pedal positions (if equipped) with your
intelligent access key if it is linked to a pre-set
position. See Memory Function (page 114).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can be
purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 63).
49
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using the
information display to determine:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the ignition on to use the system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start, when both a MyKey and an
admin key are present, the admin key will be
recognized by the vehicle when you start the
vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed by
an admin key user:
• Safety belt reminder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat passengers’ safety
belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning
activates earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
forward collision warning, lane departure
warning and Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS) with cross traffic alert.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if equipped on your vehicle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey
and before you recycle the key or restart the
engine. You can also change the settings
afterward with an admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings
will be shown in the display followed by
an audible tone when your vehicle
reaches the set speed. You cannot
override the set speed by fully depressing
the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise
control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
50
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be set.
Once you select a speed, it will be shown
in the display, followed by an audible tone
when the preselected vehicle speed is
exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off
AdvanceTrac or traction control, E911 or
Emergency Assist, or the Do Not Disturb
feature (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the
remote control into the backup position.
The location of your backup position is in
another chapter. See Starting a
Gasoline Engine (page 128).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label this
key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted at
the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure you
label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
51
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key cycle
as you created the MyKey. Once you have
switched the vehicle off, however, you will
need an admin key to change or clear your
MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 89).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
remote control.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
52
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 89).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
53
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
All Vehicles
Potential CausesCondition
The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot create a MyKey.
The key used to start the vehicle is the only key. There always has to be at least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is not programmed to your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63).
The key used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot program the
configurable settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
The key used to start your vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63).I lost a key.
The MyKey is not being used by the intended user.The MyKey distance does
not accumulate. The MyKeys have been cleared and the MyKey system has been reset.
54
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Vehicles With Push-Button Start
Potential CausesCondition
The transmitter is not in the backup position. See MyKey Troubleshooting (page 54).I cannot create a MyKey.
An admin key is present when you switch the ignition on.There are no MyKey driving
modes. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 51).
55
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control anytime your
vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals
will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The turn signals will flash
twice to indicate the unlocking mode was
changed. The unlocking mode will be applied
to the remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock all doors when two-stage unlocking
is disabled.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors
and the luggage compartment are closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment
is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with
an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the lamps will not flash.
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.
Make sure to close and latch the luggage
compartment before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched luggage compartment may cause
objects to fall out or block your view.
Activating Intelligent Access
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At the Front Doors
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door.
56
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E173603
Press and hold the door handle lock sensor
to lock your vehicle. To avoid unlocking the
door inadvertently, make sure to only touch
the lock sensor and not other areas of the
door handle.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean to
avoid issues with operation.
At the Luggage Compartment
Press the release button.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent access
key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver
or passenger power door lock control (with
the door open, vehicle park (P) and ignition
off), after you close the door your vehicle will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment. If an intelligent
access key is found inside your vehicle, all of
the doors will immediately unlock and the
horn will sound, indicating that the intelligent
access key is inside.
In order to override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle, you can lock your
vehicle after all doors are closed by using the
keyless entry keypad, pressing the lock
button on another intelligent access key or
touching the locking area on the handle with
another intelligent access key in your hand.
See Keyless Entry (page 59).
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission is
not in park (P).
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature (If Enabled)
The autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed,
and your vehicle has been in motion at a
speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
• Your vehicle has then come to a stop and
you switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
57
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you switch
the ignition off and before you open the driver
door.
Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the autolock
and autounlock features independently of
each other.
You can enable or disable these features in
the information display or your authorized
dealer can do it for you. See General
Information (page 89).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will illuminate when you unlock the doors
with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior dome lamps, parking lamps and
puddle lamps illuminate when all doors are
closed and the ignition is turned off.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse.
• You press the START/STOP button.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lamps
or headlamps on, the battery saver will shut
them off 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition
state, it will shut off once it detects a certain
amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes.
Luggage Compartment Release
From Inside Your Vehicle
Press the button located on the instrument
panel.
E173604
From Outside Your Vehicle
1. Unlock the luggage compartment with
the remote control or power door lock
control. The luggage compartment
unlocks when you press the release
button if the intelligent access transmitter
is within 3 ft (1 m).
58
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E173605
2. Press the release button.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver window.
It is invisible until touched and then it lights
up so you can see and touch the appropriate
buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on
the keypad, the unlock function may not work.
Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Open the luggage compartment.
• Recall memory features.
• Enable or disable the autolock and
autounlock.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm that programming is complete.
59
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry code
using the touchscreen.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set five-digit code will work
even if you have set your own personal
code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Note: The factory-set five-digit code cannot
be associated with a memory setting.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only
the factory-set five–digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking your vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The interior
lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you disable the
two-stage unlocking feature. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 56).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code, then press 3·4 within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
(with the driver door closed). You do not
need to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
60
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To display the factory-set five-digit code in
the information display:
E173591
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot inside the glove
compartment. The key ring must be at
the top with the buttons facing toward
the rear.
2. Press the START/STOP button once
and wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button again
and remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set five-digit code will appear in
the information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a child’s
reach. Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the luggage
compartment or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape for
children and adults if they become locked
inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
61
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that will
glow for hours in darkness following brief
exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from within
the luggage compartment.
62
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or
a second coded key on the same key chain
may cause vehicle starting problems if they
are too close to the key when starting your
vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting your vehicle.
Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the
key chain away from the coded key and restart
your vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in
your vehicle. Always take your keys and lock
all doors when leaving your vehicle. The
system is an engine immobilization system. It
will not start without a coded key programmed
to your vehicle. If you use the wrong key, a
message may appear in the information
display.
SecuriLock
The system helps prevent your vehicle from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong
key may prevent your vehicle from starting.
A message may appear in the information
display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
correctly coded key, it is not operating
properly. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms your vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle towed
to an authorized dealer. You need to erase
the key codes from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. Contact your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and
the new unprogrammed intelligent access
keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
63
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that you
close all the doors before beginning and that
they remain closed throughout the procedure.
Perform all steps within 30 seconds of
starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at
least one minute before starting again if you
perform any steps out of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E173591
1. Place the first programmed key in the
backup slot inside the glove
compartment, then press the push button
ignition switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent access
key.
If programming was not successful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you
are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. Anyone opening any
door, the luggage compartment or the hood
without using a valid key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad will set off the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash and sound
the horn up to a total of 10 times.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in the ignition. Electronically lock the
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-arm period.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry
pad.
• Press the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Enter the vehicle using intelligent access.
• Press the panic button on the remote
control. The alarm system remains
armed, but the horn and turn indicators
shut off.
Note: If the driver door is unlocked with a key,
a tone will sound when you open the door and
a message will appear in the information
display. You will have 12 seconds to disarm
the alarm using any of the actions above,
otherwise the alarm goes off.
64
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 109).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
The steering column may begin to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 114).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to allow extra room to exit
your vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the ignition
on. You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 89).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
65
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
E173608
Seek up and down or next.A
Media.B
Volume up or down.C
Mute.D
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E173609
V
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E173610
66
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your feet
are on the accelerator and brake pedals
and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 114).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
68
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E173262
Rotate the end of the control away from you
to increase the speed of the wipers. Rotate
toward you to decrease the speed of the
wipers.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the windshield
wipers before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that
does not resolve the issue, install new wiper
blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
AUTOWIPERS
E173262
Adjust the rotary control to increase or
decrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor. On
the lowest sensitivity setting, the wipers turn
on when there is a large amount of moisture
on the windshield. On the highest sensitivity
setting, the wipers turn on when there is a
small amount of moisture on the windshield.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor, located near
the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors
the amount of moisture on the windshield. It
turns on the wipers and adjusts the wiper
speed by the amount of moisture that the
sensor detects on the windshield. You can
turn this feature on and off in the information
display. See General Information (page
89).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The
rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area around
the mirror is dirty, then the wipers may
operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the windshield
wipers before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If that
does not resolve the issue, install new wiper
blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will turn on automatically when
the rain sensor turns on the windshield wipers
continuously.
69
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the following
to help keep your windshield clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Adjust the rotary control to normal or
high-speed wipe.
• Switch off the autowipers.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E173263
Press the end of the stalk to operate the
washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe without
washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe three times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will operate the
wipers and washer fluid for a short time.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
This feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 89).
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the
washer pump to overheat.
70
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the lamp
assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E173257
A
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
71
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Make sure the headlamps are switched
to auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a crash.
E173258
A
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of time
after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 89).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers
on, the headlamps will automatically turn on
when the windshield wipers continuously
operate.
72
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the lighting level will switch to the
maximum setting.
E173259
Use the instrument lighting dimmer to adjust
the brightness of the instrument panel and
all applicable lighting in your vehicle.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control to
the first detent to brighten or dim all
interior lighting incrementally.
• Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to the first detent until you reach
the desired lighting level.
• Press and hold the top of the control to
the second detent to switch the interior
lights on.
• Press and hold the bottom of the control
to the second detent to switch the interior
lights off.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with
any door open or 30 seconds after the last
door has been closed. You can cancel this
feature by pulling the direction indicator
toward you again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations or
during inclement weather. The system
does not activate the tail lamps and may not
provide adequate lighting during these
conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result
in a collision.
The system switches the signature lamps on
in day light conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the ignition
on, and switch the lighting control to the off,
autolamp, or parking lamp position.
73
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail
lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers. The
low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control of
the high beams is not functioning properly,
check the windshield in front of the camera
for a blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera’s field-of-view repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
will go into low beam mode until you clear the
blockage. A message may also appear in the
instrument cluster display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system. However, in cold
or inclement weather conditions, you will
notice a decrease in the availability of the high
beam system, especially at start up. If you
want to change the beam state independently
of the automatic control, you may switch the
high beams on or off using the lever. Automatic
control will resume when conditions are
correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may degrade
feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to turn
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 32 mph
(52 km/h).
The high beams will turn off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 89).
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position.
74
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Manually Overriding the System
E167827
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or switch
the lighting control from autolamps to
headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E193834
A
Pull the lighting control toward you to switch
the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except Off
and the high beams are not on.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
75
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When your start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first stop
position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first stop
position and hold. The direction indicator
will flash for as long as you hold the lever
in this position.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the outer edge of the clear lens
on the front row map lamp.
Front Row Map Lamps
E166237
To switch on the map lamps, press the outer
edge of the clear lens.
The front row map lamp will automatically
turn on when:
• Any door is opened.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
76
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Second Row Map Lamps
E173272
The second row lamps light when:
• Any door is open.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Press the lamp lens to activate the reading
lamps.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
77
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just
one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch before
the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
78
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an authorized
dealer. See General Information (page 89).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay
must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirrorA
Adjustment controlB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
79
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
107).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 114).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver’s exterior mirror will automatically
dim when the interior auto-dimming mirror
is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to
increase your visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
80
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The image of the approaching vehicle is small
and near the inboard edge of the main mirror
when it is at a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle approaches
(A). The image will transition from the main
mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The
vehicle will transition to your peripheral field
of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
179).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES (If Equipped)
Note: Do not try to move the sun shade
manually.
The power rear sun shade covers the rear
window of the vehicle.
81
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E187440
The control is on the center console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up and down
feature. Press and release the control to
move the sun shade. To stop motion, press
the control a second time.
The sun shade automatically retracts when
you shift the transmission into reverse (R).
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the dual panel moonroof,
you should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the roof opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are on
the overhead console.
The moonroof and sunscreen have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
the motion during a one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen
E187439
Press and release the control to open the
sunscreen.
Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panel
for the dual panel moonroof. Press and release
the control again to continue opening the
sunscreen past the second panel.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunscreen. If open, the moonroof
automatically closes prior to the sunscreen
closing.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to open
the moonroof. The sunscreen, if closed,
automatically opens prior to the moonroof
opening.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically stops closing
and reverses if it detects an obstacle when
closing.
To override the bounce-back function, pull
and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event. In this case,
the closing force begins to increase each of
the next three times the moonroof closes.
82
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof.
Pull and release the TILT control to close the
moonroof.
83
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the
information display and function the same as
a warning lamp, but do not display when you
start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 167).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop your
vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 259).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and
any door is not completely closed.
85
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 247).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Check the engine oil
level. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 33).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Grade Assist (If Equipped)
E144523
It will illuminate when the grade
assist function has been turned on.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or when
driving, check your tire pressure as soon as
possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
86
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after the
engine is started, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 137).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the
fuel system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 137).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 155).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 155).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
87
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
88
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in the
information display.
Information Display Controls
E173228
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
in the box indicates the feature is
enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature
is disabled.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
• Display Mode
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
89
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 1
Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 2
Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 3
Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 4
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST), the cluster will change to the round
tachometer if not already selected.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel
tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic
and can change (raise or lower) depending
on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is in
the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel pump
symbol shows the fuel filler door side of your
vehicle. When the fuel level becomes low,
the level indicator will change to amber.
When the fuel level becomes critically low,
the level indicator will change to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer
continuously at the top of the scale may
damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip displays.
90
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a given
trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
91
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert
Front Park Aid
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping
High, Normal or LowIntensity
Rear Park Aid
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
92
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Auto Engine Off
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Easy Entry / Exit
Auto HighbeamLighting
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote Unlocking
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto Heated or OffFront Seats
Front Seats and Steering Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
Remote OpenWindows
93
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Remote Close
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey StatusMyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temperature
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if
a MyKey is set.
94
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you have.
E173229
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 167).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 167).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 167).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
95
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Alarm
ActionMessage
The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 64).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut
off:#0} Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut
off:#0} Seconds Press Ok to Override
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating or
you are using the spare tire. The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear
this message after cycling the ignition and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed
or after the system cools.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the powertrain fault indicator is illumin-
ated. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 85). If the warning stays illuminated or continues
to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check AWD
96
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle
has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 179).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 179).Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 179).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
97
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 254).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather
or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available
98
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.Engine ON
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 127).No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not detected
inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is Active
99
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.Key Programmed x Keys Total
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.Max Number of Keys Learned
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
100
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).Oil Change Required
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
There is a malfunction with one of the features that is a part of your drive control system. See an
authorized dealer.
Drive Control Malfunction Service Required
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer
101
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 81 mph
(130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.Check Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.Check Rear Park Aid
The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
102
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Service Power Steering Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the warning
stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
103
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 286).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 286).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 286).
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than park (P).Shift to Park
104
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E173267
MY TEMP: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
DUAL: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.C
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
D
105
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach
a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though
the air conditioning is switched off.
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.G
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature.
You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
H
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 107).I
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from
the footwell air vents regardless of the air
distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your
vehicle, do not drive with the system switched
off or with recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow to
the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive
with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
106
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle
interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running before
operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle
warranty does not cover damage caused to
the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window on,
the heated exterior mirrors will automatically
turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with
a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is
frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass
with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
107
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter,
which gives you and your passengers the
following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the
system without a filter in place could result in
degradation or damage to the system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 321).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your pre-selected
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch on
the displays or indicators during remote start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. The following
features remain on if they automatically
turned on during remote start, or remain off
if they did not turn on during remote start.
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
Note: Passenger heated and cooled seats
only remain on during remote start if they were
on when you switched the vehicle off.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
89).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on pre-selected settings).
The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated
seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated and cooled seats and
heated steering wheel are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.
108
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death in
the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in
the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself
and the steering wheel. We recommend
a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
109
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
position before adjusting the head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it
is level with the top of your head and as far
forward as possible. Make sure that you remain
comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust
the head restraint to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head restraint.A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Rear seat non-adjustable outboard head
restraints
E162605
An energy absorbing head restraint.A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button.D
110
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward
again will then release it to the rearward,
untilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or seatback
when your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement,
causing the loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
111
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E138647
112
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to
prevent damage to the seat, the power seats
are designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the seat track. If the seat
encounters an object while moving forward or
backward, a new stopping position will be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping
position:
1. After encountering the new stopping
position, press the power seat control
again to override.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the seat track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about
two seconds. You will feel the seat
bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar
E173201
Press the top of the control (A) to raise the
height of the lumbar support. Press the
bottom of the control (A) to lower the height
of the lumbar support
Press the front of the control (B) to adjust
firmness. Press the rear of the control (B) to
adjust softness.
Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off after
20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate
the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E173202
Cushion and seat back massage
control.
A
Lumbar control.B
Power seat controls.C
• Seat cushion massage: Press and release
the front portion of the massage control
(A). Press again to cancel or press the
lumbar control to cancel.
• Seatback massage: Press and release the
rear portion of the massage button (A).
Press again to cancel or press the lumbar
control to cancel.
• Lumbar selection: Press either up or down
on the lumbar control (B) to select the
top, middle, or bottom part of the
seatback.
113
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
• Lumbar adjust: Press and hold the front
of the lumbar control (B) to increase the
firmness of the selected portion of the
seatback. Press and hold the rear of the
lumbar to decrease the firmness.
• Power seat controls (C).
We recommend first selecting the lumbar to
the desired setting and then selecting the
back or cushion massage setting.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are clear
of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This function automatically recalls the
position of these features.
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power adjustable pedals
• Optional power steering column.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the features to your desired
positions.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a tone sound.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a Preset Position
Press and release the desired memory preset
button to recall a saved memory position.
Note: You can recall a programmed memory
position:
• In any gearshift position if you have
switched the ignition off.
• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if you have
switched the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
56).
Note: When the ignition is off, a linked fob
used to recall your memory position moves
the seat and steering column to the Easy Entry
position if the Easy Entry and Exit feature is
enabled in the information display.
Note: During a memory recall, pressing any
seat, steering column, mirror, or memory
button cancels the operation.
114
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Linking a Preset Position to Your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
You can save the preset memory positions
for up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for five seconds. A tone sounds after
about two seconds. Continue holding
until you hear a second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in Step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) and the steering column up and
forward when you switch the ignition off.
When you switch the ignition on, the driver
seat and steering column return to the
previous position.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 89).
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion, because this may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol located on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
heated seats are on, the feature will turn
itself off. You will need to reactivate it.
After 60 minutes of operation, the heated
seats automatically turn off. Press the
symbol to switch the heated seats on.
115
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol located on the
touchscreen to cycle through the various
cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
After 60 minutes of operation, the cooled
seats automatically turn off. Press the
symbol to switch the cooled seats on.
Heated and Cooled Seat Air Filter
Replacement (If Equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 321).
Locate the filters under each front seat and
access them from the second-row footwell
area. Move the front seats all the way
forward and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of the
filter and rotate counterclockwise once
the tabs are released, then remove the
filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end is
all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside edge
of the filter and rotate up into the housing
until it clips into position.
116
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Rear Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion, because this may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
The heated seats only operate when the
ignition is on.
E166817
• Press the indicated side of the control for
minimum heat.
• Press again to turn off.
E146322
• Press the indicated side of the control for
maximum heat.
• Press again to turn off.
The indicator light will illuminate when you
switch on the heated seats.
After 60 minutes of operation, the heated
seats automatically turn off. Press the
symbol to switch the heated seats on.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder. To open the storage lid, pull
up on the latch located between the
cupholders.
Armrest pass-through
Note: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36
kilograms) of weight on the pass-through door.
117
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E152622
Release the latch, then pull down on the door
located in the back of the armrest. You can
store cargo of a longer length such as skis or
lumber.
118
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards
(this includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote
control transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the three
devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See
Erasing the Function Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
119
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different method
if you live in Canada or have difficulties
programming your gate operator or garage
door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice to
activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit
and you may need to remove the cover or lamp
lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage door
opener motor and then you have 30
seconds to complete the next two steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission – which
may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick
up the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible overheating.
120
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking
light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the button,
follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must
already be programmed to operate with the
garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
121
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2
hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
122
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
123
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter socket
(if equipped). Improper use of the
lighter can cause damage not covered by
your warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will discharge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This will
damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a
fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
discharging accidentally:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight
or when you park your vehicle for
extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• In the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console storage bin.
• On the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the device
is not in use. Do not use any extension
cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since
it will defeat the safety protection design.
Doing so my cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
power point.
E143941
You can use the power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center console.
When the indicator light, located on the
power point is:
• On — power point is ready to supply
power.
• Off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
• Flashing — power point is in fault mode.
124
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on,
but do not plug your device back in. Let the
system cool off and switch the ignition off to
reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back
on and make sure the indicator light remains
on.
Do not use the power point for certain electric
devices, including:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions.
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices which process precise
data, for example medical equipment or
measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply, for example
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch sensor lamps.
125
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard braking,
acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks
which may spill.
Available console features include:
E173268
CupholdersA
Sliding driver and passenger arm
rests, utility compartment with
audio input jack, USB port and
power point
B
Rear power point, heated seat
switches and air vents
C
Power point door and a power rear
sunshade control
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
126
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures in
the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust
fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse
electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices such as cellular phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside your
vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the
engine.
Note: When locking your vehicle, any remote
controls left inside the vehicle may become
disabled. A message may appear in the
information display indicating that there is no
key detected if you try to start the engine.
Press the unlock button on the remote control
to enable it, and then start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E142555
Off: Turns the ignition off.
127
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press the
button for any length of time. An indicator
light on the button illuminates when then
ignition is on and when the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total of
60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be
all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears in
the information display alerting you that you
exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a
15-second engine cranking time. You need to
wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E173591
1. With the buttons facing the rear of the
vehicle and the key ring up, place the key
into the backup slot.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the button to switch
the ignition on and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.
128
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if the
system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold
it there.
3. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling for
an extended period. The ignition also turns
off in order to save battery power. Before the
engine shuts down, a message appears in
the information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine
shuts down. Another message appears in the
information display to inform you that the
engine has shut down in order to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as you normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 89).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in park (P).
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
129
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a loss
of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will be
required. When the ignition is switched off,
some electrical circuits, including air bags,
warning lamps and indicators may also be
off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally,
you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the
engine.
1. Press and hold the button for one second,
or press it three times within two seconds.
2. Move the transmission selector lever to
neutral (N) and use the brakes to bring
your vehicle to a safe stop. When your
vehicle has stopped, move the
transmission selector lever to park (P)
and switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust
fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in
exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we recommend
that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury
and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
130
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances.
Do not use an indoor extension cord
outdoors. This could result in an electric
shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean
area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
131
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure.
If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel
filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an
ungrounded fuel container.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which
is a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous
under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling
excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and wash skin
thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin,
wash the affected areas immediately
with plenty of soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience
any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
132
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87. To
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission control
system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT),
which is a manganese-based fuel additive,
will impair engine performance and affect
the emission control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes
knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily
under most driving conditions while you are
using fuel with the recommended octane
rating, contact an authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel may
be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with
the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
133
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal
and cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open the
capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 133).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system and
can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages and remove the fuel tank filler
cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a fuel
tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close
the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.
Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against
the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
134
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not use personal electronic devices
while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with
the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under pressure.
If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel
filler door, do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
E175448
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
E156032
Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler nozzle
higher while you insert the nozzle for easier
access.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into
the fuel system to open both doors. Leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you have
stopped pumping fuel.
E154765
Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler
nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back
into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the tank
to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the
fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run
down the drain located below and in front of
the fuel filler door.
135
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel door will latch
closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle, several
times to allow the inlet to close properly.
This will dislodge any debris preventing
the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after four or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel
in the empty reserve varies and should not
be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is the
amount of fuel that can be added into
the tank after the gauge indicates empty.
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 296). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the empty
reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank even
when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine is
left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is your
engine’s break-in period). A more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi
(3,200 km) to 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
136
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Keeping records during summer
and winter will show how temperature
impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces fuel
economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle
such as bug deflectors, rollbars or light
bars, running boards and ski racks may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when driving
short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately.
Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Ford parts should be equivalent to
genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power
could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
137
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners
and anyone who manufactures, repairs,
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your vehicle
continues to meet government emission
standards. The OBD-II system also assists a
service technician in properly servicing your
vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 134).
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical
system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service. See
On-Board Diagnostics.
138
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’ s engine or transmission has just
been serviced, or the battery has recently run
down or been replaced, the OBD-II system
may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to
the on position for 15 seconds without
cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the
service engine soon indicator stays on solid,
it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M
testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
139
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the gearshift is latched in
Park (P). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the button on the front of
the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
4. Release the button and your transmission
will remain in the selected gear.
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the front wheels from turning. Come
to a complete stop before putting your
vehicle into and out of Park (P)
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in Reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and out
of Reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in Neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy. Transmission operates in gears
one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to Sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear operation
to enhance performance for uphill climbs,
hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This
will increase engine RPM during engine
braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and at
higher engine speeds.
140
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
With your vehicle in Drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the Sport (S)
position.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and returns
to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended
for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
The transmission will automatically upshift
if your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you move the gearshift lever to another
position. For example, Drive (D).
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive
engine revving is held without shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify
that the brake lamps are working.
When doing this procedure, you will be
taking the vehicle out of park which
means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always
fully set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or if
your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition
off before performing this procedure.
141
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
E173230
1. Remove the side panel on the left side of
the gearshift lever.
2. Locate the brake shift interlock lever on
the left side of the gearshift assembly.
3. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press down
and hold the brake shift interlock lever
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
Park (P) and into Neutral (N).
4. Install the side panel in reverse order.
5. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle, and
release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability
and provide consistent shift feel over the life
of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning
process will fully update transmission
operation. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
the strategy must be relearned.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is
not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping between
shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
142
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those conditions
could subject the vehicle to excessive stress
which might result in damage which is not
covered under your warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present,
the warning Check AWD displays in the
information display. The AWD system is not
functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning displays,
have your vehicle serviced at an authorized
dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to front-wheel
drive. This may occur if the vehicle is operated
in extreme conditions with excessive wheel
slip, such as deep sand. To resume normal
AWD function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine
for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has
been restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
will turn off and normal AWD function returns.
If the engine is not stopped, the AWD OFF
message turns off when the system cools and
normal AWD function returns.
143
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displayed when the system has been automatically disabled to protect
itself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare
tire installed or if the system is overheating. The system will resume
normal function and clear this message after cycling the ignition on
and off and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or
after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD OFF
Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reduced
power light when the system is not operating properly. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Check AWD
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than the
tire provided should never be used. The AWD
system may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components if a non-full sized tire
is installed. This condition may display an
AWD OFF message in the information
display. If there is an AWD OFF message in
the information display from using a non-full
sized spare tire, this indicator should turn off
after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles (for example, 17 inch
low profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could cause
the AWD system to stop functioning and
default to front-wheel drive or damage the
AWD system.
144
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
WARNING
Only use replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load index,
speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or
the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. If you have
questions regarding tire replacement, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high
profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the
AWD system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system. However, the AWD system is capable
of tolerating any combination of new and
worn tires of the same original tire size. For
example, using 3 worn tread tires and 1 new
tread tire all of the same original tire size, can
be tolerated by the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
145
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you do
not slow down or if you turn the steering
wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is in P
(Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is
not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a
few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping between
shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™,
it may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (that is, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as
required to avoid the emergency).
Excessive steering will result in less
vehicle control, not more. Additionally,
smooth variations of the accelerator
and/or brake pedal pressure should be
utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
146
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal
injury. Use all available road surface to
return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip through
Brake, Engine, and AWD calibrations.
However, during low speed driving, disabling
traction control in deep sand can help keep
the wheels moving to maintain vehicle
momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to
a lower gear and drive steadily through the
terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for an
extended period of time. This could cause
the AWD system to overheat and default to
front-wheel drive. If this occurs, an AWD OFF
message displays in the information display.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message turns off and normal
AWD function returns. In the event the engine
is not stopped, the AWD OFF message turns
off when the system cools and normal AWD
function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L (Low)
gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly while
applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over sand,
apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide,
steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
147
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear
axle serviced by an authorized dealer.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our national
forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling
over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive
over the crest of a hill without seeing what
conditions are on the other side. Do not drive
in reverse over a hill without the aid of an
observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent
has started. This reduces strain on the engine
and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
148
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any
other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 150).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your
vehicle have been designed and tested to
provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as
ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
149
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the brake
linings may be worn-out. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel while braking, have it checked
by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving conditions.
Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear
and does not contribute to brake noise. See
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels (page 268).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following this,
your hazard lights may also flash when your
vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 85).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few
times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal, and
can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If the
light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may
also hear a noise from the system. This is
normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
150
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, then driving your vehicle
could result in reduced braking ability,
increased stopping distances and potential
loss of brakes. See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is placed
in park (P). Failure to set the parking
brake and engage park could result in vehicle
roll-away, property damage or bodily injury.
Turn the ignition to the lock position and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
Failure to leave your vehicle securely parked
may lead to a crash or injury. See Parking
Brake (page 151).
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. At all times, you
are responsible for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system will turn off if a malfunction
is apparent or if you rev the engine
excessively. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The
system releases the brakes automatically
once the engine has developed sufficient
torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling
down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, for example from a
car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill in
an uphill gear (for example, drive (D) when
facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing
downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate the
system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the
brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is
on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
151
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the
slope without rolling away for about two
to three seconds. This hold time
automatically extends if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system remembers
the last setting when you start your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off. When
you switch the ignition on, the system
automatically turns on.
152
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order to
increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the information display controls or the
switch. If the stability control and traction
control light is still illuminating steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with the
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See Using Traction
Control (page 153).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
The switch illuminates when traction control
is off.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
153
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you
to lose control of your vehicle increasing the
risk of personal injury or property damage.
WARNINGS
Activation of the electronic stability control
system is an indication that at least some of
the tires have exceeded their ability to grip
the road; this could reduce the operator’s
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. If your
electronic stability control system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power.
154
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 153).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability controlB
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control
system off, but when you shift into reverse
(R), the system deactivates.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
153).
155
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves,
surrounding vehicle's parking aid systems,
traffic control systems, fluorescent lamps,
inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function
of the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
WARNINGS
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are
covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent,
the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false
alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 50).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that
you disable the rear sensing system when you
attach an add-on device to your vehicle to
prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 89).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 95).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object farther
than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
156
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle at
a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than park
(P) or neutral (N), and your vehicle is moving
but at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the detected
obstacle is stationary or moving towards your
vehicle.
157
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when your vehicle
is moving below a speed of 7 mph (12 km/h)
and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot replace
the driver’s attention and judgment. The
driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and speed, even
when the system is in use.
Active Park Assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the system
and intervening if required by grabbing the
steering wheel or pressing the active park
assist button (if equipped).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects in
heavy rain, snow or other conditions that cause
disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's accuracy. Do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Active Park Assist is an electric parking aid
that uses ultrasonic sensors. The system
detects an available parallel parking space
and automatically steers your vehicle into
the space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly instructs you to park your
vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (a pedestrian or
cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring
parked vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system.
The system may not operate correctly in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly
worn more than the other tires.
• One or more tires are improperly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer or
similar object to the front or rear of your
vehicle, close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging object
(surfboard) to the roof.
• The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged or obstructed (front bumper
cover).
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist
E144525
Press the button to turn the system
on or off.
158
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a
corresponding graphic appears in the display
screen to indicate it is searching for a parking
space. Use the direction indicator to indicate
which side of your vehicle you want the
system to search.
Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on your
vehicle's passenger side.
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space, the
touchscreen displays a message and a chime
sounds. Slow down, continue moving forward
and stop when another chime sounds and a
message displays on the touchscreen, then
follow the instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture and other items. You
must make sure the selected space is suitable
for parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within 5 ft
(1.5 m) and as parallel to the other vehicles as
possible while passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are
driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 22 mph
(35 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input is detected), the system switches
off and you need to take full control of your
vehicle.
159
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before
completion, the system switches off. The
steering wheel position will not indicate the
actualy position of the steering and you have
to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
display screen displays a message and a
chime sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking job and
making any necessary corrections before
putting the transmission in park (P).
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate
the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering wheel.
160
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed by
a chime. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
161
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when reverse [R] is selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
You didn't wait for the steering to complete its rotation after a gear change. The system performs best when the steering wheel is allowed
to finish rotating before accelerating.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNINGS
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to
the limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the trunk is ajar. If the trunk
is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) have
been removed when the trunk is ajar.
162
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
WARNINGS
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in R (Reverse).
Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
The image will display in either the rear view
mirror or the display in the center of the
instrument panel.
During operation, lines will appear in the
display that represent your vehicle’ s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E192471
The camera is located on the trunk.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in Reverse (R).
The system uses three types of guides to help
you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful when
backing into a parking space or aligning
your vehicle with another object behind
you.
• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align the
center of your vehicle with an object
(trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in Reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear view
camera features will display.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in Reverse (R), have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle. This
might not provide adequate coverage and you
might not see some objects. In some vehicles,
the guidelines may disappear once you
connect the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the information display.
See General Information (page 89). After
changing a system setting, the touch screen
shows a preview of the selected features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is in
Reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if Active
or Fixed guidelines are on.
163
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (if equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
If your vehicle is equipped with active
guidelines they are only available with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on your steering wheel
position. When your steering wheel position
is straight, the active guidelines are not
visible.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and
objects in the green zone are farther away.
Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as
they move from the green zone to the yellow
or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and
rear view mirror to get better coverage on
both sides and rear of your vehicle.
Enhanced Park Aids
Note: Enhanced park aids are only available
when the transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and
may not detect certain angular or moving
objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when the reverse sensing system
detects an object. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. You can disable the
reverse sensing alert if you have visual park
aid alert enabled, you will still see the
displayed highlighted areas.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle is not shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
164
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in Reverse (R).
When you shift the transmission out of
Reverse (R), the feature automatically turns
off and you must enable it to use it used
again.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
Reverse (R) and into any gear other than Park
(P), the camera image remains in the display
until your vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10
km/h or until you select a radio button.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
165
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply
the brakes. Change down a gear to assist the
system in maintaining the set speed. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E173592
The cruise controls are on the steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release Set+ or Set-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press and hold Set+ or Set- to increase
or decrease the set speed. Release the
control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release Set+ or Set-.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
166
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions when using adaptive
cruise control. The system does not
replace attentive driving. Failing to pay
attention to the road may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control will not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the road.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
WARNINGS
Do not use the adaptive cruise control
when entering or leaving a highway, in
heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, slippery or unpaved.
Do not use the system in poor visibility,
for example fog, heavy rain, spray or
snow.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component of
the adaptive cruise control system does not
operate the trailer brakes. Using adaptive
cruise control when towing a trailer that has
trailer brakes may result in the loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
E173593
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
Press and release ON.
E144529
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
E173594
167
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The current gap setting and SET also
appears in the instrument cluster.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release Set+ or Set-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
4. The information display will show a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
E173595
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of you,
your vehicle will not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor will your
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious
injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning
or a delayed warning. You should always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to
do so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
modulated by the adaptive cruise control
system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same
lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same
lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain
a preset gap distance. The distance setting
is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will illuminate.
To help you pass a vehicle in front of you, the
adaptive cruise control system may provide
a small temporary acceleration when you
switch on your left turn signal while following
a lead car.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• the vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed
• the vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view
• the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph (26
km/h)
• a new gap distance is set.
The vehicle will apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. The maximum braking which
the system can apply is limited. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an audible
warning will sound while the system
continues to brake. This is accompanied by
a heads-up display; a red warning bar
illuminating on the windshield. You should
take immediate action.
168
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E173593
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E173595
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
169
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
will select the last chosen gap for the current
driver.
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed will appear in grey.
Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap
distance by pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system, the
green indicator light illuminates
and the lead vehicle graphic does
not show in the information display.
The system will resume operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed will decrease to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release Set+ or Set-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press and hold Set+ or Set- to increase
or decrease the set speed. Release the
control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release Set+ or Set-.
The system may apply the brakes to slow the
vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display when the system is active.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the
set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle will return
to the previously set speed. The set speed
will display continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 16 mph (26 km/h). An audible
alarm will sound and the automatic braking
releases if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and the
system will shut down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system will function
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
You should select a lower gear position when
the system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
them from overheating.
170
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues can
occur due to the road infrastructures,
for example bridges, tunnels and safety
barriers. In these cases, the system may brake
late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic will not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move fully
into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert
and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or false
vehicle detections. See an authorized dealer
to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
171
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Blocked Sensor
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor
is located behind a fascia cover near the
driver side of the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and will not
function when something obstructs the radar
signals. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for this message
displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
172
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition will
either self clear or clear after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake due
to slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and
apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control.
The gap setting will not display, the system
will not automatically respond to lead
vehicles and automatic braking will not
activate. The system defaults to adaptive
cruise control when you start the vehicle.
173
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs including
the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display by selecting Settings
then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the
menu. When activated, the system will
monitor your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view the
status at any time using the information
display. See General Information (page
89).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in a
colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
174
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a warning;
you should consider resting, even if the current
assessment is within the typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to
grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the driver.
It is not intended to replace your
attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. The system may detect a
light grip or touch on the steering wheel as
hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out of
your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey®
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey®,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
E173233
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
175
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Settings
The system has one standard feature setting
and one optional setting menu available. To
view or adjust the settings, See General
Information (page 89). The system stores
the last known selection for each of these
settings. You do not need to readjust your
settings each time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane departure
is detected.
E165516
Aid only – Provides a steering wheel vibration
when the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system provides a steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does
not affect the aid mode.
176
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E144813
When you switch on the system,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle
with lane markings will display in
the information display.
E173234
If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, arrows will
be displayed with lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still
be displayed if adaptive cruise control is
enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation speed.
• Your turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings in
the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog),
traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using your direction indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
177
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows
178
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles that
may have entered the blind spot zone (A).
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior
mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond
the bumper. The system is designed to alert
you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot
zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles, people,
animals or infrastructure (fences, guardrails,
trees). It’s only designed to alert you to
vehicles in the blind spot zones.
179
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when you
drive your vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
180
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system will
no longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
• After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert. It
may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
95).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
89). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows a
system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch the
Blind Spot Information System on or off, the
alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches back on every time
you start your vehicle.
181
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
182
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
183
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
184
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series of
tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 156).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 179). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
185
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility
of the warning lamp; therefore, it is
recommended to keep the audible warning
on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert. It
may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See General
Information (page 89).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 89). When you
switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not
receive alerts and the information display will
display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and ready
to provide appropriate alerts when the
transmission is in reverse (R). Cross Traffic
Alert will not remember the last selected on
or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is
detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition
off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the
ignition on and watch the information display
for a steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message returns,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
186
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering seem
to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to apply
the brakes. This system does NOT activate
the brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may result
in a collision.
WARNINGS
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver of
certain collision risks. A radar detects if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicle
traveling in the same direction as yours.
187
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and an
audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light illuminates,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be apparent to
the driver. The system does not automatically
activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied even if
the brake pedal is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the speed
at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings by
using the information display control. See
General Information (page 89).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though the
manufacturer recommends using the highest
sensitivity setting where possible. Setting
lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later
system warnings. See General Information
(page 89).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower
grille. When the sensors are obstructed, a
vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the
collision warning system does not function.
The following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message being displayed.
188
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is no longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the speed
at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
189
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the following
systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions, and
steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in drive
(D) or in sport (S). The configuration remains
active until modified from the main menu on
the information display.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control. The
engine responds more directly to your
inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle's Drive Control
settings from the menu on the display screen.
See Information Messages (page 95).
Note: Not all settings may be available.
190
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode selections
within the information display, preventing you
from changing states when the gear position
is changed. Other types of errors produce a
temporary message in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 95). If
either condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
191
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle, trailer
or both, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle
design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety
Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including full fluids
and all standard equipment. It does
not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized
dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside the
US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED
XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
192
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum payload
for the vehicle as built by the
assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle,
you must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity
(how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight
the vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum payload
of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute
to loss of vehicle control and vehicle
rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
193
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional
equipment. When towing, trailer
tongue load or king pin weight is
also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the
total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer.
194
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is
the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo,
plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position. The Gross Vehicle
Weight must never exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
195
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
196
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could
result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle and
the loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle can
handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s
braking system is rated for operation
at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not
at Gross Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
197
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
- is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. It assumes a vehicle with
mandatory options, driver and front
passenger weight (150 pounds [68
kilograms] each), no cargo weight
(internal or external) and a tongue
load of 10–15% (conventional
trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25%
(fifth wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King
Pin Weight - refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes
down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load
range of 500 to 750 pounds (227 to
340 kilograms). For an 11500 pound
(5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain
a proper king pin load range of 1725
to 2875 pounds (782 to 1304
kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with
a higher limit than the original tires
do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNINGS
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
198
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 - (5
x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150
= 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough
load capacity in your vehicle to
transport four friends and your golf
bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) =
635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and one
of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside
of the vehicle with the rear seat
folded down, you have room for
twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram)
bags of cement. Do you have
enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you
and your friend each weigh 220
pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not
have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12
x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 =
-103 kilograms. You will need to
reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound
199
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
(45-kilogram) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be: 1400
- (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also assume
that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not
overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for
your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or
the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position.
200
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of
your vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission
damage, structural damage, loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Note: There may be electrical items
such as fuses or relays that can affect
trailer towing operation. See Fuses
(page 223).
The load capacity of your vehicle is
designated by weight not volume.
You may not necessarily be able to
use all available space when loading
your vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load
on the engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires, and suspension.
Inspect these components before,
during and after towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects the vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items in the
center of the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go above
or below 10-15% of the loaded
trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly angled
down toward the vehicle, when
viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the
increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is located
in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 192).
201
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
You can also find information in the
RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized dealer,
or online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do
not exceed 12 feet
2
(1.11 meters
2
)
trailer frontal area.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights
listed may be limited to this specified
weight, as the vehicle’s electrical
system may not include the wiring
connector needed to use electric
trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart. If your vehicle is
equipped with 3.7L engine, it cannot
tow a trailer.
202
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Maximum trailer weightPowertrain
No trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT front-wheel drive
No trailer towing permitted3.7L TiVCT all-wheel drive
1000 lb (454 kg)3.5L GTDI all-wheel drive
203
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 192).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance in
proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
204
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you
must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after
removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
205
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur
if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive
vehicle towed from the front if using proper
wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels
off the ground. When towing in this manner,
the rear wheels can remain on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel
lift equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow
it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot place the transmission in
neutral (N), you may need to override it.
See Transmission (page 140).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
206
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate
Control (page 105).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome or truck. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage your vehicle after it is hooked-up to
the recreational vehicle or tow dolly.
You can tow your front-wheel drive vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground or with the
front wheels off the ground by using a tow
dolly. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the
instructions specified by the equipment
provider. If you are towing with all four wheels
on the ground, see the following instructions.
You can tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. Do not tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear
wheels on the ground. This causes damage
to your all-wheel drive system. If you are
using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider. If you are towing with all four wheels
on the ground, see the following instructions.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the transmission in neutral (N).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours thereafter. With the
engine running and your foot on the brake,
shift into drive (D) and then into reverse
(R) before shifting back into neutral (N).
207
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
208
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your
brake performance and traction may be
limited. After driving through water and as
soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave
the pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor
mats that are firmly secured to retention
posts so that they cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied
with your vehicle. Floor mats must be
properly secured to both retention posts to
make sure mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent
them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are
loose can become trapped under the pedals
causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with
pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle
control.
209
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
210
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Lincoln Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-5333.
211
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your wallet
for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove compartment of your
vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day, seven
days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is creating
a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision,
this vehicle includes a fuel pump shutoff
feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel
pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
212
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart. Once
your vehicle determines that the systems are
safe, then the vehicle will allow you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the
battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your
eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing
of acid solution. In case of acid contact with
skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call
a physician immediately.
WARNINGS
Use only adequately sized cables with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal
of your vehicle’s battery. High current may
flow through and cause damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of
the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that
surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
213
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a
ground connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your engine
speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as
shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative
(-) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
214
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
215
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While any
authorized dealer handling your vehicle line
provides warranty service, we recommend
you return to your selling authorized dealer
who wants to ensure your continued
satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made using
Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
216
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state
replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’ s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount
equal to the actual price paid or payable by
the consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity at
the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
217
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights
and remedies not created by California Civil
Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two
parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the
claim. If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may reject
the decision and proceed to court where all
findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and
decision, are admissible in the court action.
Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO
LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the
decision, and must comply with the decision
within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right
to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process at
any time without notice and without
obligation.
218
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian
dealers. In those cases where you continue
to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and
the authorized dealer to resolve a
factory-related vehicle service concern have
been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation,
call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage
caused by use of improper fuel. Using leaded
fuel may also result in difficulty importing
your vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
219
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in the Middle East, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll
free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from
your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm,
Incorporated using the contact information
listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
220
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
221
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
222
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect the vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you will need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).
E173618
97
98
77
96
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
223
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-1
Not used.-2
Not used.-3
Wiper motor relay.
30A
2
4
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A
2
5
Not used.-6
Not used.-7
Moonroof.
20A
2
8
Power sunshade.
Second row power point.
20A
2
9
Not used.-10
Heated rear window relay.-11
Not used.-12
Starter motor relay.-13
Left-hand cooling fan number 2 relay.-14
Fuel pump relay.-15
224
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-16
Not used.-17
Front blower motor relay.
40A
2
18
Starter relay.
30A
2
19
Storage bin power point.
20A
2
20
Rear heated seat module.
20A
2
21
Not used.-22
Driver power seat.
30A
2
23
Memory module.
Not used.-24
Not used.-25
Heated rear window relay.
40A
2
26
Cigar lighter.
20A
2
27
Climate controlled seats.
30A
2
28
Electric fan relay 1.
40A
2
29
225
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electric fan relay 2.
40A
2
30
Electric fan relay 3.
25A
2
31
Massage control seat relay.Relay32
Right-hand cooling fan relay.-33
Blower motor relay.-34
Left-hand cooling fan Number 1 relay.-35
Not used.-36
Not used.-37
Not used.-38
Not used.-39
Left front smart window motor.
30A
2
40
Left rear smart window motor.
30A
2
41
Passenger power seat.
30A
2
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A
2
43
Not used.-44
Rain sensor.
5A
1
45
226
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-46
Not used.-47
Not used.-48
Not used.-49
Heated Mirrors.
15A
1
50
Not used.-51
Not used.-52
Not used.-53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.-55
Not used.-56
Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
1
57
Alternator A-line.
10A
1
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A
1
59
Not used.-60
Not used.-61
227
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
A/C clutch.
10A
3
62
Not used.-63
Massage control seats.
15A
1
64
Fuel pump relay.
30A
1
65
Fuel injectors.
Powertrain control module relay.-66
Oxygen sensor heater.
20A
1
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
Ignition coils.
20A
1
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
20A
1
69
A/C clutch.
15A
1
70
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
228
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
Not used.-72
Not used.-73
Not used.-74
Not used.-75
Not used.-76
Not used.-77
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
1
78
Not used.-79
Not used.-80
Not used.-81
Not used.-82
Not used.-83
229
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-84
Not used.-85
Powertrain control module.
7.5A
1
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Canister vent solenoid.
Run/start relay.
5A
1
87
Run/start relay.-88
Front blower relay coil.
5A
1
89
Electrical power assist steering module.
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A
1
90
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
1
91
Anti-lock brake system module.
10A
1
92
Adaptive headlamp module.
Rear window defroster relay.
5A
1
93
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/start.
30A
2
94
Not used.-95
230
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.-96
Not used.-97
A/C Clutch relay.-98
1
Mini Fuses
2
Cartridge Fuses
3
Micro Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel. You may
need to remove a trim panel to access it.
231
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
232
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Left front and right rear smart window motors.30A1
Driver seat switch.15A2
Right front smart window motor.30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Audio amplifier20A5
Active noise control module.
Not used (spare).5A6
Driver seat module logic.7.5A7
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
Not used (spare).10A8
SYNC module.10A9
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Wiper relay.
Rain-sense subfuse.
Intelligent access module logic.10A11
Heads-up display.
Puddle lamp.15A12
233
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Start button.10A18
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Immobilizer transceiver module.
Audio amplifiers.20A19
All lock motor relay and coil.20A20
Driver lock motor relay and coil.
Not used (spare).10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
234
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Decklid release.15A25
Push button ignition switch.5A26
Intelligent access module power.20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module
Front park lamps.15A30
Not used (spare).5A31
Smart window motors.15A32
Master window and mirror switch.
Rear window power sunshade module.
Lock switch illumination.
Suspension module.10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Automatic high beam and lane departure module.
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Motorized humidity sensor.5A35
Heads-up display.
Heated steering wheel.10A36
235
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).10A37
Moonroof module and switch.10A38
High beams.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
Occupant classification sensor.7.5A41
Restraint control module.
Not used (spare).5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
Not used (spare).10A44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
Fog lamp relay.15A47
Front passenger power window.30A Circuit breaker48
Rear power windows.
236
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
237
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
238
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
239
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E203008
1
240
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
2
E203009
3
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand
side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under
its own weight for the last 8–12 in
(20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
241
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 254).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 223).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 262).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 250).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I.
243
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.7L
A B C D
GHI
E F
E173333
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 247).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 254).D.
244
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 223).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 262).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 250).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I.
Engine Shield
E173374
Some vehicles may be equipped with an
aero-shield under the engine. This shield
needs to be removed for service, including oil
and filter changes. The shield has four
quick-release fasteners to secure it in place.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is between
the minimum and the maximum marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
245
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). An
oil with this trademark symbol conforms to
the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 296).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel
a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Action and descriptionMessage
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
246
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief
cap. The cooling system is under pressure.
Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully
when you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 321).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such as
Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer
75240. We do not recommend the use of
hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can cause
damage to the engine cooling or heating
systems. Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to pink
or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and
uncontaminated, this color change does not
indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it
require the coolant to be drained, the system
to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of coolant
in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may
harm your engine’s cooling system. Use
prediluted engine coolant meeting the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 296). The use of an
incorrect coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
247
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the
coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 296).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive your
vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an authorized
dealer increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection. Engine
coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an authorized
dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Engine
coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
248
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start your engine. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your vehicle
in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap
while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management
(If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed may
reduce and the vehicle may not be able
to accelerate with full power until the fluid
temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap
while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine may
temporarily reach higher temperatures during
severe operating conditions such as
ascending a long or steep grade while pulling
a trailer in high temperatures.
249
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear in
the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power. In order to
manage the engine fluid temperatures, your
vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on many factors such as vehicle
loading, towing, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to drive
your vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When the
engine coolant temperature decreases to a
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant
temperature gauge needle moves away
from the red (hot) area. After several
minutes, if the temperature does not
drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart your
engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
6F50/6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The dipstick cap and surrounding
components may be hot, use gloves.
Use gloves when moving the air filter
assembly. Components will be hot.
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive your vehicle until you warm it up,
approximately 20 mi (30 km). If you operate
your vehicle for an extended period at high
speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or
pulling a trailer, switch your vehicle off until it
reaches normal operating temperatures to
allow the fluid to cool before checking.
Depending on vehicle use, cooling times could
take up to 30 minutes or longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, you should
check the fluid level if the transmission is not
working properly. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of a fluid leak.
1. Drive your vehicle 20 mi (30 km) or until
it reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Park your vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your
foot on the brake pedal, start the engine
and move the gearshift lever through all
of the gear ranges. Allow a minimum of
10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in park (P) and
leave the engine running.
250
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine,
move the air filter assembly aside to access
the transmission dipstick. See Moving the Air
Filter Assembly for more information.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean
with a dry, lint free clean rag. If necessary,
refer to the Under hood overview in this
chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure you fully
seat it in the filler tube by turning it to the
locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid
level. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal operating
temperature.
Moving the Air Filter Assembly
(Accessing the Dipstick)
WARNING
Do not run engine with the air filter
disconnected.
1. Switch the engine off.
E173335
2
3
2. Clean the area around the clamp that
connects the air filter assembly to the
rubber hose and then loosen it.
3. Remove the bolt cover.
E173334
6
5
4
4. Remove two bolts that attach the air filter
assembly to the front of the vehicle.
5. Remove the harness retaining clip by
pulling up.
251
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
6. Do not disconnect the sensor.
E173400
7. Pull the air filter assembly up to
disconnect it from the seated grommets
located under the air filter assembly.
8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
counterclockwise. Make sure the rubber
hose is still connected to the air filter
assembly.
9. Tighten the clamp.
You can now access the transmission fluid
level indicator.
Checking the fluid level
Low fluid level
E158842
If the fluid level is below the MIN range of the
dipstick, add fluid to reach the hash mark
level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN level,
do not drive the vehicle. An underfill condition
may cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage.
Correct fluid level
E158843
Check the transmission fluid at the normal
operating temperatures between 180°F
(82°C) and 200°F (93°C) on a level surface.
Drive your vehicle until you warm it up to the
normal operating temperature after
approximately 20 mi (30 km).
Target the transmission fluid level within the
cross-hatch area if at the normal operating
temperature between 180°F (82°C) and
200°F (93°C).
252
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
High fluid level
E158844
If the fluid level is above the MAX range of
the dipstick, remove fluid to reach the
hashmark level.
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage. An overheating condition
can cause high fluid levels. If you operate your
vehicle for an extended period at high speeds,
in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a
trailer, you should switch your vehicle off until
your vehicle reaches normal operating
temperatures. Depending on vehicle use,
cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or
longer.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid
Levels
E158845
E158846
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct
type is used. The type of fluid used is
normally indicated on the dipstick and in the
Technical Specifications section in this
chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift or engagement concerns
or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
Reinstall the air filter assembly. After you
check the fluid level and adjust as necessary,
do the following:
1. Switch the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Seat the air filter assembly back into the
grommets by pushing down on the air
filter assembly.
4. Tighten the clamp.
5. Install and tighten the two bolts that
attach the air filter assembly to the front
of the vehicle.
6. Install the bolt cover.
7. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into
the front of the air filter assembly.
253
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system damage
or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin
or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty
of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your vehicle
checked immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
296).
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 296).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
254
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the
battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your
eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing
of acid solution. In case of acid contact with
skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call
a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the battery
cables from only one battery does not
disconnect your vehicle electrical system.
Make sure you disconnect the battery cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in the
vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
255
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Because your vehicle’ s engine is electronically
controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or
a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for
optimum driveability and performance.
Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn
the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 313). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 78). Reset the radio
station presets. See Audio System
(page 313).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn
the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality
of your vehicle may be adversely affected until
the engine computer eventually relearns the
idle trim and fuel trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery drain
is detected, the system temporarily disables
some electrical systems to protect the
battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. These messages are only
for notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
256
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some cases
after charging the battery with an external
charger, the battery management system
requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to
relearn the battery state of charge. During
this time your vehicle must remain fully
locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of
charge, the battery management system may
temporarily disable some electrical systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability. This
may also affect the performance of other
electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield.
See Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades (page 265).
Changing the Windshield Wiper
Blades
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting
the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not
spring back against the glass when the wiper
blade is not attached.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
257
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light from
one headlamp while adjusting the other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so
no light hits the wall.
E142465
4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from
light to dark) in the left portion of the
beam pattern. Position the top edge of
this cut-off 2 inches (5 centimeters)
below the horizontal reference line.
E167359
258
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a Phillips #2 screwdriver
to turn the adjuster either clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the vertical
aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge
of the brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb
Specification Chart (page 260).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the
bulb holder.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front direction indicators.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Side direction indicators.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Reversing lamps.
License Plate Lamp
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
259
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E178598
2. Remove the screws that secure the lamp
assembly.
E178599
3. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The specified replacement bulbs are in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T.
(Department of Transportation) for North
America to affirm lamp performance, light
brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp
assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Trade numberFunction
D3S* Headlamp (high intensity discharge) Low and High
LED* Sidemarker - front
LED* Park lamp - front
7444NA* Turn lamp - front
H11Fog lamp
LEDSignal indicator mirror lamp
LEDApproach lamp
LED* Tail and brake lamp
260
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Trade numberFunction
LED* Turn lamp - rear
LED* Backup lamp
W5WLicense plate lamp
LED* High-mount brake lamp
W5WInterior lamps
* To replace these lamps, see an authorized dealer.
To replace instrument panel lights, see an authorized dealer.
261
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
Do not start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
When changing the air filter element, use only
the air filter element listed. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 296).
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, when
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enters the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 321).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine damage.
Resulting component damage may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition off.
E173520
2. Remove the clips that secure the air filter
housing cover.
3. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
4. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
5. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
6. Install a new air filter element.
7. Install the air filter housing cover. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing and
cover. This could cause filter damage
and allow unfiltered air to enter the
engine if it is not properly seated.
8. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
262
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
263
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash the affected area as soon as possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they can
scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at
an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage
graphics and cause the edges to peel away
from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
264
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always
wash your vehicle before applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to
clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid
could penetrate the sealed parts and
cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is
hot or running; water in the running engine
may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark
plug wire or spark plug well, or the area
in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
265
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle
warranty does not cover damage caused to
the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or
dye on the vehicle’s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNINGS
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material,
spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft
Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products
or glass cleaners, which can stain and
discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning
leather seats for cleaning leather instrument
panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See
Cleaning Leather Seats (page 267).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
266
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If
a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your
warranty may not cover these damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been
spilled on the instrument panel or on interior
trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning
leather seats for cleaning leather instrument
panels and leather interior trim surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as dye
transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots,
road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
267
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may cause
damage to the finish on your wheel rims and
covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,
fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This will reduce the
risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply using
manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days
or more, read the following maintenance
recommendations to make sure your vehicle
stays in good operating condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against
rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
268
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm
that there are no cooling system leaks
and that fluid is at the recommended
level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory features
if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
269
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire
Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200 Traction
AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They
do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver
or temporary use spare tires, light
truck or LT type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades
exactly as the government has
written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1 ½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics
and climate.
270
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the
tire’ s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
• Tire Identification Number: A
number on the sidewall of each
tire providing information about
the tire brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of
manufacture. Also referred to as
DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
271
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 (2.5 bar) depending on tire
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure
will not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry
a heavier maximum load at 42
psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the
tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven
for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door
• Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
272
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed rating.
The definitions of these items are
listed below. (Note that the tire size,
load index and speed rating for your
vehicle may be different from this
example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and
light trucks. Note: If your tire size
does not begin with a letter this may
mean it is designated by either the
European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of height
to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index.
It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You
may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a
local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to
be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of
load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at
different conditions for load and
inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for
the difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
273
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes
use the letters ZR. For those with a
maximum speed capability over 186
mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go
to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the
tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel, nylon,
polyester, and others.
274
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the
correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
275
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as
well on the government course
as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test
wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or
the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load or
radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
276
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at
psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle
(a total of six or more tires on the
vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the
rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below:
277
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In
general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of height
to width. Numbers of 70 or lower
indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing
tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can
lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital or
dial-type tire pressure gauge rather
than a stick-type tire pressure
gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns
278
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire
stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can
lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum
inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended
tire inflation pressure is found on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’ s door. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear
patterns and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door. The cold inflation pressure
should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C)
temperature drop can cause a
corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa)
in inflation pressure. Check your tire
pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which
can be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
279
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example driven more than 1 mile [1.6
kilometers]), never bleed or reduce
air pressure. The tires are hot from
driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended
cold pressures. A hot tire at or below
recommended cold inflation pressure
could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance
to get air for your tire(s), check and
record the tire pressure first and add
the appropriate air pressure when you
get to the pump. It is normal for tires
to heat up and the air pressure inside
to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck
the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at 60
psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could
poke a hole in the tire and cause
an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails
or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and
valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and
repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire
sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or
excessive wear. If internal damage
to the tire is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because
they are more likely to blow out or
fail.
280
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare, frequently,
and replace them if one or more of
the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the
tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall).
If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire
professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection
after off-road use is also
recommended.
281
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage conditions,
and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires
experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT
Tire Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of
a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant
code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go
to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric
or all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
282
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information
is not found on these labels then
you should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended
by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed below.
If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure
on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
WARNINGS
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer
or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of
12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires generally
be replaced as a pair.
283
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be
used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the operation
of your tire pressure monitoring
system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire pressure
monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can
tear the tire and cause an explosion.
A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
WARNINGS
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires
may fail and injure a passenger or
bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to
do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This
may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been
damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you
can safely pull off the road. Stop
and inspect the tires for damage. If
a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel (if provided). If you cannot
detect a cause, have the vehicle
towed to the nearest repair facility
or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end of
your vehicle to become misaligned
or cause damage to your tires. If
your vehicle seems to pull to one
side when you’re driving, the wheels
may be out of alignment. Have an
authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
284
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front or
the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should
be corrected by an authorized
dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles
and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly is defined as a
spare wheel and tire assembly that
is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly it is intended
for temporary use only and should
not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle
requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as indicated
in the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter) will help your tires wear
more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires on the left
side of the diagram)
E142547
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires on
your vehicle, they must be the same
size, construction, and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard, and
they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead
to loss of vehicle control.
285
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Do not use snow chains or cables on
this vehicle as they may cause damage
to your vehicle which may lead to loss
of vehicle control.
Snow chains have not been approved for use
on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your vehicle
may have an all-weather tread design to
provide traction, handling, and braking
performance in year-round driving. You may
install snow tires for improved traction when
driving in areas with sustained periods of
snow or icy driving conditions.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should
be checked periodically (at least monthly)
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in
this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
286
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system complies
with part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel and
tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible
unless the tire is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short
time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure
monitoring system, have the damaged road
wheel and tire assembly repaired and
remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
287
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
288
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off
after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase
about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from a cold
start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to
the nearest location where air can be added
to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use of
the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 286).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped
with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be
mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease
your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side
of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
286). Replace the spare tire with a road tire
as soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
289
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle
with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle
with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if
applicable).
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable).
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
290
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission
is in park (P).
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be sure
to place the transmission in park (P),
set the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNINGS
Always use the jack provided as original
equipment with your vehicle. If using a
jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make
sure the jack capacity is adequate for the
vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo
or modifications.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E173211
3. Lift the trunk cargo cover, and remove the
wing nut that secures the spare tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
291
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the second wing nut that secures
the jack retention bracket by turning it
counterclockwise. Then remove the jack
kit from your vehicle.
6. Remove the jack and the wrench from
the felt bag. Fold down the wrench socket
used to loosen the lug nuts and to
operate the jack.
Vehicle Jacking
E142551
1. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, remove
them with the lug wrench tip and loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise. Do not remove them
until the wheel is raised off the ground.
3. The vehicle jacking points are shown here,
and are depicted on the warning label on
the jack.
E145908
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
4. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills
show the location of the jacking points.
E142553
5. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
6. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
7. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 294).
292
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
9. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened so
it does not rattle when you drive. Unblock
the wheels.
Stowing the flat tire
1. Remove the extension bolt from the
exterior pocket of the felt bag.
E173212
2. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With the
jack in place, place the end of the
retention bracket over the threaded stud
in the trunk floor and secure it with the
plastic wing nut.
3. Screw the extension bolt onto the
threaded stud of the jack retention
bracket.
E173213
4. Place the flat tire in the spare tire well
with the wheel facing up.
5. Safely secure the wheel by screwing the
large wing nut onto the extension bolt.
293
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are stowing the temporary spare
tire, place the tire over the jack and secure it
with the large wing nut.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal
contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting
in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)1/2 x 20
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
294
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
295
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoboostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
296
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
3.7LEngine
226Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
297
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter.
BXT-65-650Battery.
FP-68Cabin air filter.
FL-500-SOil filter.
SP-534Spark plugs.
WW-2501 (driver side)Windshield wipers.
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement
parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered
for your vehicle. The use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to the use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use
an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 321).
298
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter.
BXT-65-650Battery.
FP-68Cabin air filter.
FL-500-SOil filter.
SP-520Spark plugs.
WW-2501 (driver side)Windshield wipers.
WW-2043 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement
parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered
for your vehicle. The use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to the use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use
an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an
authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs
at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 321).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
299
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body typeC
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch, next
to the driver's seating position.
300
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along with
the transmission description.
CodeDescription
JSix-speed automatic transmission (6F50)
CSix-speed automatic transmission (6F55)
301
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
11.4 qt (10.8 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid
11.6 qt (11 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
18 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (71.9 L)Fuel tank
1.63 lb (0.74 kg)Air conditioning refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)Air conditioning refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
302
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
303
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
304
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
305
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade, this
may lead to:
• Component damage which is not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
306
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could lead
to engine damage that may not be covered
by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended fluid
may cause degraded brake performance and
not meet the Ford performance standards.
Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system damage
and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
11.1 qt (10.5 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
307
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
18 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
19.0 gal (71.9 L)Fuel tank
1.43 lb (0.65 kg)Air conditioning refrigerant
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)Air conditioning refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
308
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
309
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
310
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade, this
may lead to:
• Component damage which is not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
311
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could lead
to engine damage that may not be covered
by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended fluid
may cause degraded brake performance and
not meet the Ford performance standards.
Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system damage
and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
312
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs
only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in Ford
CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on
your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact an authorized
dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs
or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
313
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3
and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum
number of playable MP3 and WMA files
may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a
folder structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all
folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the
system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in
the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated systems
when possible. Make sure you are aware of
all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchsceen system controls most
of the audio features. See your MyLincoln
Touch information.
314
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E146318
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press to eject a CD.B
TUNE: Press to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In
SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), turn the
TUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Volume: Press to adjust the volume.D
315
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Power: Press to switch the system on and off.E
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either reverse
or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.
F
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E207805
See your SYNC information.
316
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit our online store
at:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
vehicle through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle limited
warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Moonroof deflectors.
• Side-window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior style
• All-weather floor mats.
• Carpeted floor mats.
• Sport pedals.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages).
• Car cover*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo organization and management.
Peace of mind
• Locking fuel plug.
• Wheel locks.
• Remote start.
• Vehicle security.
*The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Lincoln
Licensed Accessories, and does not design
or test these accessories to Lincoln Motor
Company engineering requirements. Contact
an authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
317
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
318
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S.
Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP, you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills
and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over 1000
covered components, this plan is so
complete that we generally only discuss
what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in the
United States, Canada and Mexico. It is the
only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires, you
can transfer any remaining coverage to the
new owner. Whenever you sell your vehicle,
prospective buyers may have a higher degree
of confidence that vehicle was properly
maintained with Lincoln ESP, thereby
improving resale value.
319
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail
to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS
(CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln Motor
Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on
the plan you purchase, Lincoln Extended
Service Plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
320
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous
testing. It is important that you have your
vehicle serviced at the proper times. These
intervals serve two purposes; one is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 296).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the
training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and
Saturday hours to make your service visit
more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services that
are required on your vehicle, from general
maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or
body shops. Please contact your dealer for
details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
321
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in the
information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil change
within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See (page 89).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops these
systems using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should inspect
discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required to
fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
322
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
323
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it
is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
324
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor
or technician about the multi-point vehicle
inspection. It is a comprehensive way to
perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle.
Your checklist gives you immediate feedback
on the overall condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in the
information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
325
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
326
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
327
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary to
perform the extra maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km)). Perform the engine air
filter replacement.
328
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
329
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle and PTU maintenance items under Exceptions.
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
330
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and PTU Maintenance
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle
(AWD only) in your vehicle does not require
any normal scheduled maintenance. The PTU
lube will be more likely to require a fluid
change if the vehicle has experienced
extended periods of extreme/severe duty
cycle driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit has
been submerged in water or shows signs of
leakage. Contact your authorized dealer for
service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's useful
life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges
you to have all recommended maintenance
services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of
SM or SN quality, the normal oil change
interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
331
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
332
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
333
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
334
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
335
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
336
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
337
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
338
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
339
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
340
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
341
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
342
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
343
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
344
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
345
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
346
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
347
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
348
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
349
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
350
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
351
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several devices,
including SYNC ® and various control
modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
suppliers shall be liable for any damages
arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any open
source components included with the
SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
352
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any open
source components included with the
SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based services.
You acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent may automatically
check the version of the SOFTWARE
and/or its components that you are
utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may
be automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or third party software and
services suppliers provide or make
available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
353
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates
nor its designated agent are responsible
for (i) the contents of any third party
sites, any links contained in third party
sites, or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other
form of transmission received from any
third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those
links are provided to you only as a
convenience, and the inclusion of any link
does not imply an endorsement of the
third party site by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If
the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance
with this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject
to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as
well as end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
354
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner
before attempting to access a function
of the system requiring prolonged
attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume at
a level where you can still hear outside
traffic and emergency signals while
driving. Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data while
driving can distract your attention and
could cause an accident or other serious
injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal
manner before attempting these
operations.
355
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your
personal judgment. Any route suggestions
made by this system should never replace
any local traffic regulations or your
personal judgment or knowledge of safe
driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would
be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
356
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
357
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in violation
of applicable law or otherwise driving in
an unsafe manner presents a significant
risk of distracted driving and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not be
attempted under any circumstances;(c)
The SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv)
may contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider (WSP)
and any data or minute calculators that
may be included in the software program
are for reference only, are not warranted
in any way and should not be relied upon
in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD
MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
358
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT
OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any
dispute, action, or other controversy between
You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other
than the exceptions listed above, concerning
the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court in
your county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the right
to litigate (or participate in as a party or class
member) all disputes in court before a judge
or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved
before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision
will be final except for a limited right of
appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any
court with jurisdiction over the parties may
enforce the arbitrator’s award.
359
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding in
which any party acts or proposes to act in a
representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American Arbitration
Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You
are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing
will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org or
call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county of
residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
last written settlement offer made before
the arbitrator was appointed (“last
written offer”), your dispute goes all the
way to an arbitrator’ s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards you
more than the last written offer, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will give you three
incentives: (1) pay the greater of the
award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your
attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s
fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it
reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the
arbitration frivolous or brought for an
improper purpose. In any arbitration
FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences,
it will pay all filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s
fees and expenses. It will not seek its
attorney’s fees or expenses from you in
any arbitration. Fees and expenses are
not counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
360
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA
to which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not
filed within one year, it is permanently barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of law,
with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or http://www.telenav.com from time
to time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places
you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into
an area that you consider to be unsafe, do
not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your driving
and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure to
comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
361
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav; (c)
remove from the TeleNav Software, or
alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers'
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent
or copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software
to others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy
or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision made
or action taken by you or anyone else in
reliance on the information provided by
the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does
not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav
Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things,
road closures, construction, weather, new
roads and other changing conditions. You
are responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav Software.
For example but without limitation, you
agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software
for critical navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others is
362
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
dependent on the accuracy of navigation,
as the maps or functionality of the
TeleNav Software are not intended to
support such high risk applications,
especially in more remote geographical
areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in accordance
with the laws of the State of California,
without giving effect to its conflict of law
provisions. To the extent judicial action
is necessary in connection with the
binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you
363
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting
them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your consent
to receive Notices electronically, you must
discontinue your use of the TeleNav
Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in
full force and effect.
364
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, you
may not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
365
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
with any positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of which
may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE
OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not allow
certain liability exclusions or damages
limitations, so to that extent the above may
not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously existing
between us with respect to such subject
matter.
366
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or more
of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
367
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all use
of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide, including any
copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote may
enforce its respective rights, collectively or
separately, under this agreement against you,
directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS
SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT
EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE
FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
368
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
369
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
370
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..............................................105
About This Manual................................................7
Protecting the Environment.....................................7
ABS
See: Brakes................................................................150
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.....................................................................150
Accessories..........................................................317
Exterior style...............................................................317
Interior style................................................................317
Lifestyle........................................................................317
Peace of mind............................................................317
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation......11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..................167
Active Park Assist..............................................158
Automatic Steering into Parking Space..........159
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...............160
Troubleshooting the System................................161
Using Active Park Assist........................................158
Adaptive Headlamps.........................................75
Adjusting the Headlamps.............................258
Horizontal Aim Adjustment................................259
Vertical Aim Adjustment......................................258
Adjusting the Pedals.........................................68
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........................65
Easy Entry and Exit Feature...................................65
End of Travel Position..............................................65
Memory Feature........................................................65
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps......................................75
Airbag Disposal...................................................45
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..............................................105
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..................262
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................64
All-Wheel Drive..................................................143
Ambient Lighting.................................................77
Anti-Theft Alarm................................................64
Arming the Alarm......................................................64
Disarming the Alarm................................................64
Appendices.........................................................352
Audible Warnings and Indicators..................87
Headlamps On Warning Chime...........................88
Keyless Warning Alert..............................................87
Parking Brake On Warning Chime......................88
Audio Control.......................................................65
MEDIA............................................................................66
Seek, Next or Previous............................................66
Audio System......................................................313
General Information................................................313
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD................................................................314
Autolamps.............................................................72
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps..........72
Automatic Climate Control...........................105
Automatic High Beam Control.......................74
Activating the System..............................................74
Manually Overriding the System..........................75
Automatic Transmission................................140
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning..................................................................142
Brake-Shift Interlock................................................141
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow........................................................................142
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission............141
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission..................................140
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.................................................................250
6F50/6F55 Transmission...................................250
Autowipers............................................................69
Auxiliary Power Points.....................................124
110 Volt AC Power Point.........................................124
12 Volt DC Power Point...........................................124
Locations.....................................................................124
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...............................................143
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery...........................255
Blind Spot Information System....................179
Switching the System Off and On.....................181
System Errors.............................................................181
Using the System....................................................180
371
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...............240
Booster Seats.......................................................23
Types of Booster Seats...........................................23
Brake Fluid Check.............................................254
Brakes....................................................................150
General Information...............................................150
Breaking-In.........................................................208
Bulb Specification Chart...............................260
C
Cabin Air Filter....................................................108
California Proposition 65..................................10
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™......................................................302
Specifications..........................................................303
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........307
Specifications..........................................................308
Capacities and Specifications....................296
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...................................264
Center Console...................................................126
Changing a Bulb...............................................259
Front Fog Lamp.......................................................259
High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps.............259
LED Lamps................................................................259
License Plate Lamp...............................................259
Changing a Fuse................................................237
Fuses............................................................................237
Changing a Road Wheel................................289
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information..........................................................289
Stowing the flat tire...............................................293
Tire Change Procedure..........................................291
Changing the 12V Battery..............................255
Battery Management System............................256
Changing the Engine Air Filter.....................262
Changing the Wiper Blades..........................257
Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades.........257
Checking MyKey System Status....................53
Checking the Wiper Blades...........................257
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance......................................................34
Child Restraint Positioning..............................25
Child Safety............................................................15
General Information..................................................15
Child Safety Locks...............................................27
Left-Hand Side...........................................................27
Right-Hand Side.........................................................27
Cleaning Leather Seats..................................267
Cleaning Products............................................263
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels...........................268
Cleaning the Engine........................................265
Cleaning the Exterior......................................264
Exterior Chrome Parts...........................................264
Exterior Plastic Parts.............................................264
Stripes or Graphics.................................................264
Underbody................................................................264
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.............................266
Cleaning the Interior.......................................266
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades................................................................265
Clearing All MyKeys............................................52
Climate Control.................................................105
Climate Controlled Seats................................115
Cooled Seats..............................................................116
Heated Seats..............................................................115
Collision Warning System..............................187
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.................................187
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.................................247
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator............44
Creating a MyKey.................................................51
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.....................................................................51
Cross Traffic Alert..............................................182
False Alerts................................................................186
Switching the System Off and On....................186
System Errors............................................................186
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.......................................................................185
System Limitations.................................................185
Using the System.....................................................182
Cruise Control......................................................66
Principle of Operation............................................166
Type 1.............................................................................66
Type 2.............................................................................67
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control.....................................166
Customer Assistance.......................................216
372
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
D
Data Recording.......................................................9
Event Data Recording.................................................9
Service Data Recording.............................................9
Daytime Running Lamps..................................73
Direction Indicators............................................76
Lane Change................................................................76
Drive Control.......................................................190
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL.................................190
Driver Alert............................................................174
Using Driver Alert......................................................174
Driver and Passenger Airbags........................38
Children and Airbags................................................39
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.............................................................38
Driving Aids..........................................................174
Driving Hints.......................................................208
Driving Through Water...................................208
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...............................73
E
Economical Driving.........................................208
Emission Control System................................137
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).........................138
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing.........................................................138
End User License Agreement......................352
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ......................................352
Engine Block Heater.........................................130
Using the Engine Block Heater.............................131
Engine Coolant Check.....................................247
Adding Engine Coolant..........................................247
Checking the Engine Coolant.............................247
Recycled Engine Coolant.....................................248
Severe Climates......................................................248
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...................................................................248
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63
Engine Oil Check...............................................245
Adding Engine Oil....................................................245
Engine Oil Dipstick...........................................245
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™......................................................296
Drivebelt Routing....................................................296
Engine Specifications - 3.7L..........................297
Drivebelt Routing.....................................................297
Environment..........................................................14
Essential Towing Checks..............................204
Before Towing a Trailer.........................................205
Hitches........................................................................204
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).............................................205
Safety Chains...........................................................204
Trailer Brakes............................................................204
Trailer Lamps...........................................................204
When Towing a Trailer..........................................205
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording...................................................9
Export Unique Options......................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).......................319
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA
ONLY).....................................................................320
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S.
Only)........................................................................319
Exterior Mirrors.....................................................79
Auto-Dimming Feature...........................................80
Blind Spot Monitor.....................................................81
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.....................................79
Heated Exterior Mirrors...........................................80
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors...............................80
Memory Mirrors..........................................................80
Power Exterior Mirrors..............................................79
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...................................29
Safety Belt Extension Assembly...........................31
Safety Belt Locking Modes....................................30
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy................29
Floor Mats...........................................................209
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps..............................................75
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals......................................68
Front Fog Lamps.................................................75
Front Parking Aid................................................157
Front Passenger Sensing System.................39
Fuel and Refueling............................................132
Fuel Consumption............................................136
Calculating Fuel Economy...................................136
Filling the Tank..........................................................136
373
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.............................133
Fuel Filter.............................................................255
Fuel Quality..........................................................132
Choosing the Right Fuel........................................132
Fuel Shutoff.........................................................212
Fuses.....................................................................223
Fuse Specification Chart...............................223
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel..............231
Power Distribution Box..........................................223
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener..................119
Gauges....................................................................84
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.......................................................46
Intelligent Access......................................................46
General Maintenance Information..............321
Multi-Point Inspection..........................................324
Owner Checks and Services...............................322
Protecting Your Investment.................................321
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?................................321
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?............................................................321
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada...............................................................219
Getting the Services You Need....................216
Away From Home....................................................216
Global Opening and Closing...........................79
Closing the Windows...............................................79
Opening the Windows.............................................79
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake....................................................151
Hazard Warning Flashers................................212
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps..........................258
Headlamp Exit Delay.........................................73
Head Restraints.................................................109
Adjusting the Head Restraint...............................110
Tilting Head Restraints ...........................................111
Heated Steering Wheel.....................................67
Heated Windows and Mirrors.......................107
Heated Exterior Mirror............................................107
Heated Rear Window.............................................107
Heating
See: Climate Control..............................................105
Hill Start Assist....................................................151
Switching the System On and Off.....................152
Using Hill Start Assist..............................................151
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..............................................................106
Cooling the Interior Quickly..................................107
General Hints............................................................106
Heating the Interior Quickly..................................107
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...............107
Recommended Settings for Heating................107
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather..................................................................107
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................150
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...............240
I
In California (U.S. Only)...................................217
Information Display Control............................67
Information Displays.........................................89
General Information.................................................89
Information Messages......................................95
Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................95
AdvanceTrac™...........................................................95
Alarm.............................................................................96
Automatic Engine Shutdown...............................96
AWD...............................................................................96
Battery and Charging System...............................97
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System......................................................................97
Brake System..............................................................98
Collision Warning System......................................98
Doors and Locks........................................................99
Fuel.................................................................................99
Keys and Intelligent Access...................................99
Lane Keeping System............................................100
Maintenance...............................................................101
MyKey...........................................................................102
Park Aid.......................................................................102
Power Steering.........................................................103
Seats.............................................................................103
Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................104
Transmission.............................................................104
374
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Installing Child Restraints.................................17
Child Seats.....................................................................17
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts................................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH)...................................................................20
Using Tether Straps...................................................21
Instrument Cluster.............................................84
Instrument Lighting Dimmer...........................73
Interior Lamps......................................................76
Front Row Map Lamps............................................76
Second Row Map Lamps........................................77
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release.................................................................61
Interior Mirror.........................................................81
Auto-Dimming Mirror................................................81
Introduction.............................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..............................213
Connecting the Jumper Cables...........................213
Jump Starting............................................................214
Preparing Your Vehicle...........................................213
Removing the Jumper Cables.............................214
K
Keyless Entry........................................................59
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD....................................................................59
Keyless Starting..................................................127
Ignition Modes...........................................................127
Keys and Remote Controls.............................46
L
Lane Keeping System......................................175
Switching the System On and Off.....................175
Lighting Control....................................................71
Headlamp Flasher.....................................................72
High Beams...................................................................71
Lighting.....................................................................71
General Information...................................................71
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services........11
Load Carrying......................................................192
Load Limit............................................................192
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.......................................................................192
Locking and Unlocking.....................................56
Activating Intelligent Access.................................56
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)..............................57
Battery Saver..............................................................58
Illuminated Entry.......................................................58
Illuminated Exit..........................................................58
Luggage Compartment Release.........................58
Power Door Locks.....................................................56
Remote Control.........................................................56
Smart Unlocks............................................................57
Locks.......................................................................56
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel............................289
M
Maintenance......................................................240
General Information..............................................240
Media Hub............................................................316
Memory Function...............................................114
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..................................115
Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key...................115
Saving a Preset Position.........................................114
Message Center
See: Information Displays......................................89
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors....................107
See: Windows and Mirrors.....................................78
Mobile Communications Equipment...........12
Moonroof...............................................................82
Bounce-Back..............................................................82
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...................82
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.................82
Venting the Moonroof..............................................83
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™..........298
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L...................................299
MyKey Troubleshooting....................................54
MyKey™.................................................................50
Principle of Operation.............................................50
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...............325
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™..............................325
Maintenance Intervals..........................................326
375
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset...........................246
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check...........................................245
Opening and Closing the Hood..................240
Closing the Hood......................................................241
Opening the Hood..................................................240
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature..........................................................220
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..............220
Overhead Console............................................126
P
Parking Aids........................................................156
Principle of Operation............................................156
Parking Brake.......................................................151
Passive Anti-Theft System.............................63
SecuriLock....................................................................63
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System..........................63
Pedals.....................................................................68
Perchlorate..............................................................11
Personal Safety System™..............................36
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?.......................................................................36
Post-Crash Alert System................................215
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..................................56
Power Seats..........................................................111
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion
(If Equipped)..........................................................113
Power Lumbar............................................................113
Power Steering Fluid Check.........................254
Power Windows...................................................78
Accessory Delay.........................................................78
Bounce-Back...............................................................78
One-Touch Down......................................................78
One-Touch Up............................................................78
Window Lock...............................................................78
Protecting the Environment............................14
R
Rear Parking Aid................................................156
Rear Seat Armrest..............................................117
Armrest pass-through.............................................117
Rear View Camera............................................162
Using the Rear View Camera System..............163
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.........................................162
Recommended Towing Weights................202
Refueling...............................................................134
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System......................135
Remote Control...................................................47
Car Finder.....................................................................48
Intelligent Access Key..............................................47
Remote Start..............................................................48
Replacing the Battery...............................................47
Sounding a Panic Alarm.........................................48
Remote Start......................................................108
Automatic Settings................................................108
Repairing Minor Paint Damage....................267
Replacement Parts Recommendation.........11
Collision Repairs..........................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs........................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts..........................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.................................................................49
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)....................................................................221
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..................................................................220
Roadside Assistance.........................................211
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance...............................................................211
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance
Program Coverage..............................................212
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance..............................................................212
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...........................................211
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...........................................211
Roadside Emergencies.....................................211
Running-In
See: Breaking-In......................................................208
Running Out of Fuel..........................................133
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...............................................................134
Filling a Portable Fuel Container........................133
376
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
S
Safety Canopy™.................................................42
Safety Precautions............................................132
Scheduled Maintenance Record................332
Scheduled Maintenance.................................321
Seatbelt Height Adjustment............................31
Seatbelt Reminder.............................................33
Belt-Minder™.............................................................33
Seatbelts................................................................28
Principle of Operation..............................................28
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...................................................................32
Conditions of operation..........................................32
Seats......................................................................109
Security...................................................................63
Side Airbags...........................................................41
Sitting in the Correct Position......................109
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains......................................285
Special Notices.....................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty..............................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)............................12
Special Instructions...................................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...................................................328
Exceptions.................................................................330
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.................................................166
Stability Control.................................................154
Principle of Operation............................................154
Starting a Gasoline Engine............................128
Automatic Engine Shutdown..............................129
Failure to Start..........................................................129
Fast Restart................................................................128
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.....................130
Important Ventilating Information....................130
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving....................................................................130
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..............................................................129
Starting and Stopping the Engine...............127
General Information................................................127
Steering................................................................186
Electric Power Steering.........................................186
Steering Wheel....................................................65
Storage Compartments..................................126
Sunroof
See: Moonroof............................................................82
Sun Shades............................................................81
Sun Visors...............................................................81
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.........................................81
Supplementary Restraints System..............37
Principle of Operation..............................................37
Symbols Glossary..................................................7
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.................296
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)............................218
Tire Care...............................................................270
Glossary of Tire Terminology...............................271
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading...................................................................270
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall..................................................................272
Temperature A B C...................................................271
Traction AA A B C.....................................................271
Treadwear..................................................................270
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............286
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System...................................................................287
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..................................................................287
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires...........................................270
Towing a Trailer..................................................201
Load Placement.......................................................201
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.........206
Emergency Towing.................................................206
Recreational Towing..............................................207
Towing...................................................................201
Traction Control.................................................153
Principle of Operation............................................153
Transmission Code Designation..................301
Transmission......................................................140
Transmission
See: Transmission...................................................140
Transporting the Vehicle...............................206
377
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™......................................................242
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L........................244
Engine Shield............................................................245
Universal Garage Door Opener.....................119
HomeLink Wireless Control System..................119
Using Adaptive Cruise Control......................167
Blocked Sensor..........................................................172
Changing the Set Speed.......................................170
Detection Issues........................................................171
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control...............170
Following a Vehicle.................................................168
Hilly Condition Usage.............................................170
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation.................170
Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control...................170
Resuming the Set Speed......................................170
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control.........................167
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..................168
Setting the Gap Distance.....................................169
Switching the System Off......................................171
Switching to Normal Cruise Control..................173
Using All-Wheel Drive......................................143
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD)..........................................................145
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires..........................................................................145
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires.........................................................................144
Using Cruise Control........................................166
Switching Cruise Control Off...............................167
Switching Cruise Control On...............................166
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...............................................................54
Using Snow Chains..........................................285
Using Stability Control....................................155
Using Traction Control.....................................153
Switching the System Off.....................................153
System Indicator Lights and Messages...........153
Using a Switch..........................................................153
Using the Information Display Controls..........153
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).................................................219
V
Vehicle Care........................................................263
General Information...............................................263
Vehicle Certification Label...........................300
Vehicle Identification Number....................299
Vehicle Storage.................................................268
Battery........................................................................269
Body.............................................................................268
Brakes.........................................................................269
Cooling system........................................................269
Engine.........................................................................269
Fuel system...............................................................269
General.......................................................................268
Miscellaneous..........................................................269
Removing Vehicle From Storage......................269
Tires.............................................................................269
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..............................................105
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number.................299
Voice Control........................................................66
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.....................85
Adaptive Cruise Control..........................................85
Anti-Lock Braking System.....................................85
Battery...........................................................................85
Brake System..............................................................85
Cruise Control.............................................................85
Direction Indicator.....................................................85
Door Ajar.......................................................................85
Engine Coolant Temperature...............................86
Engine Oil.....................................................................86
Fasten Safety Belt....................................................86
Front Airbag................................................................86
Front Fog Lamps.......................................................86
Grade Assist................................................................86
Heads Up Display......................................................86
High Beam...................................................................86
Low Fuel Level............................................................86
Low Tire Pressure Warning....................................86
Low Washer Fluid......................................................86
Parking Lamps............................................................87
Powertrain Fault.........................................................87
Service Engine Soon.................................................87
Stability Control.........................................................87
Stability Control Off.................................................87
378
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Washer Fluid Check.........................................254
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...................................264
See: Wipers and Washers......................................69
Waxing..................................................................265
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel............................289
Wheels and Tires..............................................270
Technical Specifications......................................294
Windows and Mirrors.........................................78
Windshield Washers..........................................70
Windshield Wipers.............................................69
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades........................257
Wipers and Washers.........................................69
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle............................206
379
MKS (CLE) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
